‫‪www.onlinedoctranslator.

com - naisreP ot hsilgnE morf detalsnarT‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.1.3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ‪ Main-2‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Line‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 255‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ 255‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Smooth animation‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Anti-aliasing‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺁﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺿﺪﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪22-8‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.1.4‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Line‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-9‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫‪22.2‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Rectangle‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﮏﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﮐﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺉﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ ،Rectangle‬ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺯﯾﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Rectangle‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ Read Address‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Rectangle‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.2.1‬ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 22.2.1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Rectangle‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ Rectangle‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬

‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺁﻓﺴﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻧﻔﻮﺫ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺒﮏ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺻﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺿﺪ ﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺸﺶ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ ،Y‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬

‫‪22-10‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(4‬‬

‫)‪(6‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬

‫)‪(7‬‬

‫)‪(8‬‬
‫)‪(9‬‬

‫)‪(10‬‬

‫)‪(11‬‬ ‫)‪(12‬‬

‫)‪(13‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.2.2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Rectangle‬‬

‫‪22-11‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Position‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Read Address‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Position‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+1‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ Y‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+2‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+3‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Color‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+4‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 65535‬ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Blink‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+5‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﯾﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡﭘﯿﻮﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Position‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ No‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺮ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﭘﻠﮏﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﭘﻠﮏﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬

‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ Y‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ Y‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬

‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬ ‫‪N+1‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬ ‫‪N+1‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬
‫‪N+2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬ ‫‪N+2‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ Y‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪N+3‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬
‫‪N+3‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬ ‫‪N+4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪N+5‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺴﺖﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ‪ D‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ BCD، Signed Decimal، Unsigned Decimal :‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.Hexadecimal‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-12‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Rectangle‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬
‫ﭘﻮﯾﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 65535‬ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Yes‬ﯾﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Rectangle‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫)‪(5‬‬

‫‪22-13‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﺧﻂ‬ ‫)‪(6‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺯﻥﺧﻂ‬ ‫)‪(7‬‬

‫‪.‬ﻋﺮﺽ‪ 2/‬ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ 2/‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪ g‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫)‪(8‬‬
‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺁﯼ‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫‪nt.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪Foregr‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬

‫ﭘﯿﺶﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫‪22-14‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‪ Blink‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Yes‬ﯾﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ Read‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﻠﮏﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫)‪(10‬‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Yes‬ﯾﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ‪ Transparent‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞﭘﻮﯾﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﯼ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(11‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ Rectangle‬ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺭﻭﯼ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺁﻥﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﯾﮏ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Numeric Entry‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻔﻮﺫﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮ‬

‫ﻧﻔﻮﺫﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫)‪(12‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Numeric Entry‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽﺭﻭﯼ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﻮﺫﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬

‫‪22-15‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺳﺒﮏﭘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺮﯼ ‪ DOP-100، Gradient‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫‪ DOP-B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﯼ ‪ DOP-100‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﯼ ‪ DOP-B‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﯿﺐ‬

‫ﺳﺒﮏﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫)‪(13‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ)ﺟﺎﻣﺪ(‬

‫‪22-16‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.2.3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ 2-‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Rectangle‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 255‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ 255‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Smooth animation‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Anti-aliasing‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺁﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺿﺪﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪22-17‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.2.4‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Rectangle‬‬

‫‪22-18‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﺸﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﺑﺎﻧﮏ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺉﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻧﮏﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ‬

‫‪22-19‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪-‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ Alignment‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻢﺗﺮﺍﺯﯼ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪-‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ Stretch Mode‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Stretch All، Stretch 1:1‬ﻭ ‪.Actual Size‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﺶ‪1:1‬‬ ‫ﮐﺸﺶﻫﻤﻪ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ‪ Stretch 1:1‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺻﺮﻑﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‪ Stretch All‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 1:1‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﭘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬

‫ﮐﺶﺁﻣﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﯾﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﭼﮏ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﯾﮏﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫‪22-20‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.2.5‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Rectangle‬‬

‫‪22-21‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﯽ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬

‫‪22-22‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.2.6‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Rectangle‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-23‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫‪22.3‬ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻭﺱﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﯼ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﯿﻀﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ Read Address‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Circle‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.3.1‬ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 22.3.1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Circle‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ Circle‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬

‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺁﻓﺴﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺻﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺿﺪ ﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ ،Y‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬

‫‪22-24‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(4‬‬

‫)‪(6‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬

‫)‪(7‬‬
‫)‪(8‬‬

‫)‪(9‬‬

‫)‪(10‬‬

‫)‪(11‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.3.2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Circle‬‬

‫‪22-25‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Central Point‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Read Address‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Central Point‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+1‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ‪ Radius‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+2‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ‪ Radius‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+3‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Color‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+4‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 65535‬ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Blink‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+5‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Circle‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ‬
‫ﺯﻥﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡﭘﯿﻮﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Central Point‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ No‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫ﭘﻠﮏﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﭘﻠﮏﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪ᴠ‬‬

‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ Y‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ‬

‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬
‫ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪N+1‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪N+1‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬
‫‪N+2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪N+2‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪N+3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪N+3‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪N+4‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪N+5‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺴﺖﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ‪ D‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ BCD، Signed Decimal، Unsigned Decimal :‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.Hexadecimal‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-26‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪0‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ‪ 65535‬ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Yes‬ﯾﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ‪ Variable Central Point‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ Circle‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Circle‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰﯼ‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ Circle‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Circle‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬

‫‪22-27‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﺧﻂ‬ ‫)‪(6‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺯﻥﺧﻂ‬ ‫)‪(7‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬

‫ﭘﯿﺶﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫)‪(8‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫‪22-28‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‪ Blink‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Yes‬ﯾﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ Read‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Circle‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﻠﮏﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫)‪(9‬‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Yes‬ﯾﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ‪ Transparent‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪ Circle‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(10‬‬

‫ﺳﺒﮏﭘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺮﯼ ‪ DOP-100، Gradient‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ‪ DOP-B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﯼ ‪ DOP-100‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻪﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﯼ ‪ DOP-B‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﯿﺐ‬

‫ﺳﺒﮏﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫)‪(11‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ)ﺟﺎﻣﺪ(‬

‫‪22-29‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.3.3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ 2-‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Circle‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 255‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ 255‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Smooth animation‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Anti-aliasing‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺁﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺿﺪﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪22-30‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.3.4‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Circle‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬

‫‪22-31‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.3.5‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Circle‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-32‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫‪22.4‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Polygon‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.4.1‬ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 22.4.1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Polygon‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪﺿﻠﻌﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ Polygon‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺻﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺿﺪ ﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ ،Y‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬

‫‪22-33‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫)‪(4‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.4.2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Polygon‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﺧﻂ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫‪22-34‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥﺧﻂ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬

‫ﭘﯿﺶﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Yes‬ﯾﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ‪ Transparent‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ‪ Polygon‬ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪22-35‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.4.3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ 2-‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Polygon‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 255‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ 255‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Smooth animation‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Anti-aliasing‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺁﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺿﺪﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪22-36‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.4.4‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Polygon‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬

‫‪22-37‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.4.5‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Polygon‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-38‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫‪22.5‬ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Text‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Text‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.5.1‬ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 22.5.1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Text‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ Text‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪، Read Offset Address، Foreground Color، Transparent، Smoothing‬‬
‫‪ Read Address‬ﻭ ‪ Use Text Pic‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺻﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺿﺪ ﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ ،Y‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬

‫‪22-39‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬

‫)‪(4‬‬

‫)‪(5‬‬

‫)‪(6‬‬

‫)‪(7‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.5.2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Text‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Position‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Read Address‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‪ Variable Position‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Yes‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ]‪ [Read Address+1‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ Y‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺴﺖﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ‪ D‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ BCD، Signed Decimal، Unsigned Decimal :‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.Hexadecimal‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-40‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬

‫ﭘﯿﺶﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Yes‬ﯾﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ‪ Transparent‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(5‬‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪22-41‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﺎﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﯼﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﺎﻑﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫)‪(6‬‬

‫ﺻﺎﻑﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺻﺎﻑﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪22-42‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺮﯼ ‪ DOP-B‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺍﺉﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﯼ‪ DOP-100‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ًﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺉﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ‪HMI‬‬
‫‪،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩﻫﺎﯼ ‪ DOP-B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Use Text Pic‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ Text، Button‬ﻭ ‪Message Display‬‬
‫‪ General‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ‪ Text Pic‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫ﯾﮏﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Text‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ]‪ [Main‬ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Use Text Pic‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ DOPSoft 4.00.06‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ‪ DOP-B‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺯ‪ Text Pic‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫)‪(7‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Pic‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻠﻪ(‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ‪ DOP-100‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻣﮏﺍﻝ‬

‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ Use Text Pic‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺧﯿﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪﺗﺐ ]‪ [Text‬ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﭘﺲﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ HMI‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Use Text Pic‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪22-43‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.5.3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ‪ Main-2‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Text‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 255‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ 255‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Smooth animation‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Anti-aliasing‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺪﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬

‫‪22-44‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(4‬‬

‫)‪(5‬‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.5.4‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Text‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪-‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺏ ‪ /‬ﺯﯾﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪22-45‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮﻣﺘﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Text‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶﭼﻨﺪ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﺹﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫)‪(5‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎ‬

‫‪22-46‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.5.5‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Text‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺉﯽ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬

‫‪22-47‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.5.6‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Text‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-48‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫‪22.6‬ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﯿﻢﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﯾﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Scale‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.6.1‬ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 22.6.1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ Scale‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﻭ ﮐﺴﺮﯼ )ﺭﻗﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺻﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺿﺪ ﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬

‫ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‪،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ ،Y‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬

‫‪22-49‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫)‪(5‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬

‫)‪(6‬‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫)‪(7‬‬

‫)‪(8‬‬

‫)‪(4‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.6.2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Scale‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺩﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ Word ،‬ﻭ ‪.Double Word‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫‪22-50‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪-‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪-‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪ Double Word‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﻭ ﮐﺴﺮﯼ )ﺭﻗﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﺴﺮﯼ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﮐﺴﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩﺻﺤﯿﺢ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫)ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﯾﭗﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0‬ﺗﺎ ‪9999‬‬ ‫‪BCD‬‬ ‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ‪/‬‬

‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ 3278-‬ﺑﻪ ‪32767+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﯼﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﺵ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪0‬ﺗﺎ ‪65535‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﯼﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬

‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪0‬ﺗﺎ ‪99999999‬‬ ‫‪BCD‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪ 2147483648-‬ﺑﻪ ‪2147483647+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﯼﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻤﻪ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪0‬ﺗﺎ ‪4294697295‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﯼﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩﺻﺤﯿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﻭ ﮐﺴﺮﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﮐﺴﺮﯼ‬
‫)ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬

‫‪22-51‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Yes‬ﯾﺎ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﯼﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﯼ‪ No‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪99‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬

‫)‪(6‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫‪22-52‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫)‪(7‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫ﺳﺒﮏﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪ ،90‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪ 180‬ﻭ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪ 270‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪270‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪180‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪90‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﺳﺒﮏ‬ ‫)‪(8‬‬

‫‪22-53‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.6.3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ 2-‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Scale‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 255‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ 255‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Smooth animation‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Anti-aliasing‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺪﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬

‫‪22-54‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.6.4‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Scale‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫‪22-55‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.6.5‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Scale‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-56‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫‪22.7‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ Table‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺉﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ‪،Windows Office‬‬
‫ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫ﮐﻪﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯿﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ Table‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.7.1‬ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 22.7.1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ Table‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺶﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺸﺒﮏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﻭ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺳﻄﺮ ‪ /‬ﺳﺮﺳﺘﻮﻥ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﯼﺗﻮﺯﯾﻊ ﯾﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﯾﻊ ﯾﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺻﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺿﺪ ﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ ،Y‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬

‫‪22-57‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬

‫)‪(7‬‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.7.2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Table‬‬

‫‪22-58‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬

‫ﺭﺩﯾﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺗﯿﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬

‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬

‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺗﯿﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬

‫‪22-59‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﻫﺎﯼ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﻫﺎﯼ)ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬

‫)ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ(‬
‫ﺭﺩﯾﻒﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﯼ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﯼ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬

‫)ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬

‫‪22-60‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﻫﺎﯼ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪﺭﺩﯾﻒ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬

‫)ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ(‬
‫ﺭﺩﯾﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺗﯿﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﯼ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪﺳﺘﻮﻥ )ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬

‫)ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺗﯿﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬

‫‪22-61‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪ Distribute Rows Evenly‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺯﯾﻊﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺩﯾﻒﻫﺎ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﯼ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22-62‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪ Distribute Columns Evenly‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺯﯾﻊﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﯼ‬

‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪22-63‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫‪cription‬‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﻟﺒﻪ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺯ‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫ﺭﺍﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪G‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓﺧﻂ ﻣﺸﺒﮏ‬

‫ﺧﻂﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‪ 99‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩﯾﻒﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ‬

‫‪22-64‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻭﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬

‫ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫)‪(7‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫‪22-65‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪2-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.7.3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ 2-‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Table‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 255‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ 255‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Smooth animation‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ Anti-aliasing‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺁﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺿﺪﺁﻟﯿﺎﺳﯿﻨﮓ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫‪22-66‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 22.7.4‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪Table‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﯿﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬

‫‪22-67‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬

‫)ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻤﺪﺍ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬

‫‪22-68‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦﻓﺼﻞ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﭘﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺉﯿﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬

‫‪23.1‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ··································· ‪3-23‬‬

‫‪23.2‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 32‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ································| ································ ‪20-23‬‬
‫‪23.3‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻏﯿﺮﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ )*‪23-38········· |······································ (RCP‬‬
‫‪23.4‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ······························ ‪41-23‬‬
‫‪23.5‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻏﯿﺮﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )*‪|||··················································· (ENRCP‬‬

‫‪23-1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﯾﮏﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ HMI‬ﺑﻪ ‪ PLC‬ﯾﺎ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ‪ PLC‬ﺑﻪ ‪ HMI‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ .HMI‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉﻧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ HMI‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ‪:HMI‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ 32‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬

‫‪23-2‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫‪23.1‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﮐﻨﯿﺪﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍﯼ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺟﯿﺴﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ‪ Recipe‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪.‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ RCPNO‬ﻭ ‪ RCP‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﺭﺟﯿﺴﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ‪Recipe 16‬‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪RCP‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ‬ ‫‪RCPNO‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 23.1.1‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬

‫‪23-3‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺮ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺖ )‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺖ = ‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ L‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ G‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ L*G‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ)‪(L‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‪L * G :‬‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ)‪(G‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 23.1.2‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ )‪(RCPNO‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ‪ /‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ;RCPNO = 1 ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ‪.RCPNO = 4 ،‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺟﯿﺴﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ‪ HMI‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪RCPNO =1‬‬

‫‪RCPNO =4‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 23.1.3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬

‫‪23-4‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ )‪(RCP‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﯾﮏﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ HMI‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﯼ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ L‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‪،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ (‪ L * )G+1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪G+1‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﻔﻒﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺟﯿﺴﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﺉﯿﭻ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ )‪ 1 (RCPNO‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻓﺮ)ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ‪ RCPNO = 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ(‪.‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬
‫‪RCPNO =1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ)‪(L‬‬

‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ)‪(G‬‬ ‫{ [‪ ]L*)G+1(-1‬ﺗﺎ ‪RCPn }n: 0‬‬

‫‪ 1-‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ‪ 0‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫)‪(1‬‬
‫‪RCPNO =1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‪L * G :‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ‪ -‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 23.1.4‬ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 23.1.1‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬

‫‪ RCP65535‬ﺑﻪ ‪RCP0‬‬ ‫‪RCPn‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ RCP65535.15‬ﺗﺎ ‪RCP0.0‬‬ ‫‪RCPn‬‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ 0) n = Word:‬ﺗﺎ ‪(65535‬‬

‫‪23-5‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺭﺍﺉﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ RCP‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩﺷﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ‪*3‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ RCP‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ RCP12‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ RCP11.‬ﺗﺎ ‪RCP0‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 23.1.5‬ﺧﻄﺎﯼ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪.1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ‪ USB‬ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ SD‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﮏ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ )‪ 4194304 = (L*G‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ]‪ [Memory List] < [View‬ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻇﺮﻓﯿﺖﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 23.1.6‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬

‫‪23-6‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫‪.2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ HMI‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ )‪ (L*G‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫= ‪ 65536‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﯾﺎ ‪ .64K‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ 64K‬ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﭘﯿﺎﻣﯽﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﯾﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 23.1.7‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ‪Recipe‬‬

‫‪23-7‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ‪ ،Recipe‬ﺑﻪ ]‪ [Recipe] < [Options‬ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﯼ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ PLC‬ﺑﻨﻮﯾﺴﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ PLC‬ﺑﻪ ‪ HMI‬ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﮎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺁﯾﻨﺪﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ‪ 23.1.8‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬

‫ﺑﻪﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ Recipe 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 23.1.2‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪23-8‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 23.1.2‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪ :1‬ﺑﻪ ]‪ [16-Bit Recipe] < [Recipe] < [Options‬ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥﭼﮏ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ‬
‫‪.2‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ D20‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ‪ Length‬ﻭ ‪ Groups‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.3‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫‪.4‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪﺧﻮﺏﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ Length‬ﻭ ‪ Groups‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪23-9‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬
‫ﯾﮏﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Numeric Entry‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ Write‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ RCPNO .‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪RCPNO‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩﯼ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬

‫‪-‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪RCPNO‬‬

‫‪23-10‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫‪.1‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ )ﻃﻮﻝ )‪ x (L‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ )‪ (3 x 3 = (G‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ (‪ L * )G+1‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ RCP = RCP0‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ RCP11‬ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 12.2‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RCP0‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ RCP11‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪RCP‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩﯼ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬

‫‪.3‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪﺑﺎﻓﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ RCP0:‬ﺗﺎ ‪ RCP2‬ﺑﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪RCP‬ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ‪ RCP3‬ﺗﺎ ‪ RCP11‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ 23.1.4‬ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ‪ Recipe‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪23-11‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻪﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ‪ D20، D21‬ﻭ ‪ D22‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ PLC‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‪ Read‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Numeric Entry‬ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ D20‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩﯼ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬

‫‪-‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪PLC‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬

‫ﺑﻪ]‪ [Control Block] < [Configuration] < [Options‬ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍﭘﺮﭼﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﻠﻮﮎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲﺍﺯ ﺗﮑﻤﯿﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪﺧﻮﺏﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﯼ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺮﭼﻢﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪23-12‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Set Constant‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ Write Addresses ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ D5‬ﻭ‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ )‪ (.Detail‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺭﻭﯼ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﯿﺖ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ﺑﯿﺖ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ‪D5 Recipe Control‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬

‫ﭘﺲﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ Compile‬ﻭ ‪ Download Screen‬ﻭ ‪ Recipe‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ HMI‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ RCP0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ RCP11‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ‪ RCP0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ RCP2‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ‪ RCP3‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬
‫‪RCPNO‬‬
‫‪RCP2‬‬ ‫‪RCP1‬‬ ‫‪RCP0‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬

‫‪RCP5‬‬ ‫‪RCP4‬‬ ‫‪RCP3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬

‫ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ‬

‫‪RCP8‬‬ ‫‪RCP7‬‬ ‫‪RCP6‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫‪RCP11‬‬ ‫‪RCP10‬‬ ‫‪RCP9‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‬

‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‪PLC‬‬

‫‪D22‬‬ ‫‪D21‬‬ ‫‪D20‬‬

‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ (‪ Write Recipe )HMI To PLC‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍﯼ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ )‪= 1‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ (RCPNO‬ﺩﺭ ‪ PLC‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ (‪ Read Recipe )PLC To HMI‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ PLC‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ HMI‬ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ًﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ )‪ (RCPNO = 2‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪23-13‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪DOPSoft‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬
‫‪RCPNO‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﭘﺨﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﯾﺴﯿﺪ‬

‫(‪ PLC‬ﺑﻪ ‪)HMI‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﭘﺨﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﯾﺴﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻡ‪2‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪PLC‬‬

‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‪PLC‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪1‬‬ ‫‪RCPNO‬‬

‫ﮔﺎﻡ‪2‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺁﺷﭙﺰﯼ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‪PLC‬‬
‫ﭘﺲﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ،2‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ 2 ،1‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ PLC‬ﺑﻪ ‪ HMI‬ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﭘﺨﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬

‫(‪ HMI‬ﺑﻪ ‪)PLC‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺬﺍ‬
‫‪RCPNO‬‬

‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‪PLC‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ‪HMI‬‬

‫‪23-14‬‬